Table of Contents
Introduction
4
Instrument Cluster
12
Warning lights and chimes
Gauges
12
17
Entertainment Systems
19
AM/FM stereo
19
21
26
32
35
AM/FM stereo with single CD
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
Satellite radio information
Climate Controls
39
Heater only
Manual heating and air conditioning
39
40
Lights
42
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
42
46
46
Driver Controls
53
Windshield wiper/washer control
Steering wheel adjustment
Power windows
Mirrors
Speed control
53
54
55
56
57
Locks and Security
62
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
62
62
66
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Maintenance and Specifications
213
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Engine coolant
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
223
227
233
235
241
258
Maintenance product specifications and capacities
Engine data
260
264
Accessories
Index
268
269
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and
without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2007 MNAO
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the
time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.
The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following
website:
• In the United States: www.mazdausa.com
• In Canada: www.mazda.ca
Additional owner information is given in separate publications or refer to
the Mazda importers/distributors section in the Customer Assistance
chapter.
This Owner’s Manual describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Manual when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off
switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of
personal injury to yourself or
others? In this guide, answers to
such questions are contained in
comments highlighted by a bold
WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing
of automotive fluids.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition,
your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance
Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not
covered, refer to the Warranty Information Booklet that is provided to
you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Event Data Recorder
The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data
potentially including but not limited to information such as:
• the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and
passengers,
• information about the performance of various systems and modules in
the vehicle, and
• information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system
status potentially including information related to how the driver
operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed.
This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or
near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by:
• service and repair facilities.
• law enforcement or government agencies.
• the Manufacturer and Distributor.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual
carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Manual
Fasten Seat Belt
Airbag - Side
Protecting the
Environment
Airbag - Front
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Brake System
Parking Aid System
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Stability Control System
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Defrost/Demist
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Power Windows
Personal Alarm System
Feature
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MIN
Power Steering Fluid
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Jack
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Check fuel cap
Speed Control
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.
Mazda may change the contents without notice.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Instrument cluster
(pg. 12)
Instrument panel dimmer
control
(pg. 43)
Headlamp control
(pg. 42)
Turn signal and
wiper/washer control
(pg. 53)
Speed control*
(pg. 57)
Driver air bag
(pg. 86)
Hood release
(pg. 222)
Parking brake release
(pg. 153)
* If equipped
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Audio system
(pg. 19)
4wd control*
(pg. 162)
Passenger airbag
indicator
(pg. 91)
Cigar lighter*
(pg. 55)
Auxiliary power point*
(pg. 54)
Climate control system
(pg. 39)
Auxiliary input
jack*
(pg. 32)
* if equipped
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService
engine soonЉ light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire.
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap if
this light remains on. Continued
driving with this light on may cause
the Service engine soon warning
light to come on.
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an
improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap
depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
!
P
BRAKE
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can
cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected; have the system
serviced immediately by your
ABS
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the
supplemental restraint system has been detected.
Seat belt: Reminds you to fasten
your seat belt. A Belt-Minder
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your seat belt. Refer to the
Seating and safety restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder chime feature.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON,
have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more
information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range. Refer to Engine oil
in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Foglamps: Illuminates when the
foglamps are turned on. Refer to
Foglamp control in the Lights
chapter.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty. Rrefer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Overdrive off (if equipped):
O/D
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned off. Refer to the
OFF
Driving chapter. If the light flashes steadily or does not come on,
have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the
transmission could occur.
Four wheel drive low (if
4x4
LOW
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is engaged.
NOTE: If the light continues to
flash have the system serviced.
Four wheel drive high (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is engaged. It
may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged. Refer to the
Driving chapter for more information.
4x4
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Speed control (if equipped):
Illuminates when the speed control
is engaged. Turns off when the
speed control system is disengaged.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not
fully closed).
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications
chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the
radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result
in serious burns.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press the button once until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). To reset
the trip, press and hold the control
again for approximately 2 seconds,
until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip
and odometer, press and release the control.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Proper gauge indication requires the
ignition to be in the OFF or
ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication
after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons
(11 liters) is needed for correct indication after refueling.
NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of
vehicle control, accident and injury. Mazda strongly
recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any
device that may take their focus off the road. The drivers
primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle.
Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the
driving task when it is safe to do so.
Display preference: You can select Clock mode, which displays the
time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio frequency, to
appear in the radio display. Press CLK repeatedly to toggle between
Clock and Frequency modes. If clock mode is selected and a radio
function is pressed (i.e. SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio
information will display momentarily and then again display the time.
1. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. CLK —To set the time:
Ensure that your audio system
is turned off. Press and hold
CLK until the hours flash in the
display. Press
Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press
AUDIO to adjust the minutes.
AUDIO
to adjust the hours.
To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock
mode and frequency mode.
3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO
repeatedly to toggle through the
following modes and
use
/
to make adjustments in those modes.
AUDIO to decrease/increase the bass setting.
AUDIO
AUDIO
Bass: Press
Treble: Press
to decrease/increase the treble setting.
to adjust the audio between the left and
Balance: Press
right speakers.
Hours: Press
AUDIO
AUDIO
to decrease/increase the hours.
to decrease/increase the minutes.
Minute: Press
4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up (
/
) the radio frequency
and in audio mode to select various settings.
5. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset
station, press the desired memory preset.
6. SEEK: Press
SEEK
to
access the previous or next
radio station.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
the system ON/OFF. Turn to
adjust the volume levels.
If the volume is set above a
certain level, and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back
on.
AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 Satellite Compatible system
(if equipped)
1. CD eject: Press to eject the
CD/MP3.
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINS is displayed. Press
MENU
to adjust the
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is
off.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
3. MUTE: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to
return to the playing media.
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to scroll through the following
modes and use
/
to make
an adjustment in those modes.
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if equipped): Press MENU when satellite
radio mode is active to access. Press SEEK
radio menu. Press
• CATEGORY: Press SEEK
MENU to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel
Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK when the desired
to enter into the satellite
/
to cycle through the following options:
to enter category mode. Press
category appears in the display. After a category is selected, press
SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e.
ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available
SIRIUS categories and channels. Press SEEK
to the main menu.
to close and return
• SAVE SONG: Press SEEK
to save the currently playing song in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press SEEK
while SONG ALERT is in the
display and the system will take you to the channel playing the
desired song. You can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a
song when the system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG?
Press SEEK
to access the saved songs and press
MENU
to
cycle through the saved songs. When the song appears in the display
that you would like to replace, press SEEK
will appear in the display.
. SONG REPLACED
• DELETE SONG: Press SEEK
to delete a song from the system’s
to cycle through the saved songs. When
memory. Press MENU
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
SEEK
. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press
SEEK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do
not want to delete the currently listed song, press
MENU
to
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
select either RETURN or CANCEL.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press SEEK
to delete all song’s from the
to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press
SEEK
read ALL DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press SEEK
to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Press
MENU
to set the strongest local radio stations
for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset
stations.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press
MENU
MENU
MENU
to decrease/increase the bass setting.
to decrease/increase the treble setting.
to adjust the audio between the left
TREBLE: Press
BALANCE: Press
and right speakers.
FADE: Press
MENU
to adjust the audio between the front and
rear speakers.
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press
the previous/next directory.
MENU
MENU
to go to
to select
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, use
flat file mode or directory mode.
Normal / Track title/ File name: Use
/
to scroll through MP3
display options (track #, normal music name or file name).
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
5. TUNE: Press to manually go
down/up (
/
) the radio
frequency and also to select
various settings in menu mode.
6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to
play the current CD/MP3 tracks
in random order. In MP3
directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory
in random order.
7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track. The
selection will repeat
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.
8. FF (Fast forward): Press to
manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
9. REW (Rewind): Press to
REW
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3
track.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously
set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly. You can
save up to 18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access
the previous/next (
/
)
strong station. In CD/MP3 mode,
press to advance to the
previous/next (
/
) track.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK
to seek to
the previous/next channel.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
In CATEGORY MODE, press
that category. Press SEEK
SEEK
to select a channel within
to seek to the previous/next channel
in the selected category. Press and hold
through the previous /next channels.
SEEK
to fast seek
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK
to view the previous/additional
display text.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
12. TEXT/SCAN:In radio and CD
mode, press for a brief
sampling of radio stations or CD
tracks. Press again to stop.
In MP3 mode, Press and release to view the next 12 characters in the
MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all
tracks in the current directory. Press and hold again to stop.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the
Satellite text message.
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press and
hold again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
13. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
14. AUX: Press to access AUX
modes.
If equipped with Satellite
Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3
(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary
audio mode, if equipped).
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to
increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is
turned back on.
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already
present in the system, the disc
will begin to play.
17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label
side up.
Premium and Audiophile In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Satellite
Compatible audio systems (if equipped)
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
1. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.
2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in
the system, the disc will start
playing.
3. AUX: Press to access AUX
modes. To return to radio mode,
press AM/FM.
If equipped with Satellite
Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3
(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary
audio mode, if equipped).
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
4. EJ (CD eject): To eject an
individual CD/MP3, press the
eject control and select the
correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.
Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.
5. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINS is displayed. Press
MENU
to adjust the
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is
off.
6. MUTE: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to
return to the playing media.
7. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to toggle through the following
modes and use
/
to make
adjustment in those modes.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
SATELLITE RADIO MENU (if
equipped): Press MENU when
satellite radio mode is active to
access. Press SEEK
to enter
into the satellite radio menu. Press
/
to cycle through the following
options:
• CATEGORY: Press SEEK
to enter category mode. Press
to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel
MENU
Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK
when the desired
category appears in the display. After a category is selected, press
SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only (i.e.
ROCK). You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available
SIRIUS categories and channels. Press SEEK
to the main menu.
to close and return
• SAVE SONG: Press SEEK
to save the currently playing song in
the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than a song,
CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song is
playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press SEEK
while SONG ALERT is in the
display and the system will take you to the channel playing the
desired song. You can save up to 20 songs. If you attempt to save a
song when the system is full, the display will read REPLACE SONG?
Press SEEK
to access the saved songs and press
MENU
to
cycle through the saved songs. When the song appears in the display
that you would like to replace, press SEEK
will appear in the display.
. SONG REPLACED
• DELETE SONG: Press SEEK
to delete a song from the system’s
to cycle through the saved songs. When
memory. Press MENU
the song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press
SEEK
. The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press
SEEK
again and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do
not want to delete the currently listed song, press
select either RETURN or CANCEL.
MENU
to
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• DELETE ALL SONGS: Press SEEK
to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press
SEEK
to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will
read ALL DELETED.
Note: If there are no songs presently saved, the display will read NO
SONGS.
• ENABLE ALERTS / DISABLE ALERTS: Press SEEK
to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
option is to turn them off.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
AUTOSET: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press
MENU to access. Use
MENU
to set.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
BASS: Press
MENU
MENU
MENU
to decrease/increase the bass setting.
TREBLE: Press
to decrease/increase the treble setting.
BALANCE: Press
right speakers.
to adjust the audio between the left and
to adjust the audio between the front and
FADE: Press
MENU
rear speakers.
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU
/
to go to
the previous/next directory.
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.
Track #/ normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and
use to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music
name or file name).
/
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
8. TUNE/DISC:In radio mode,
press to manually go down/up
(
/
) the radio frequency,
or to access another CD/MP3.
Also use in menu mode to select various settings.
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to
play the tracks on the current
CD/MP3 in random order. In
MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current
directory in random order.
10. COMP (Compression): In
CD/MP3 modes, press to bring
loud and soft passages together
for a more consistent listening level.
11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track. The
selection will repeat
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.
12. FF (Fast forward): Press to
manually advance in a CD/MP3
track.
13. REW (Rewind): Press to
REW
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3
track.
14. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
REW
1
FF
2
REPEAT
3
COMP
4
SHUFF
5
6
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset
station, press the desired memory preset. You can save up to 18
stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets,
six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a
preset control until sound returns.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
15. SEEK/TRACK:In radio, CD
and MP3 flat file mode,
press
/
to access the
previous/next strong station or
track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track
in the current directory.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press
SEEK
to seek to
the previous/next channel.
In CATEGORY MODE, press
that category. Press and hold
previous /next channels.
SEEK
SEEK
to select a channel within
to fast seek through the
In TEXT MODE, press
SEEK
to view the previous/additional
display text.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
16. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and
CD mode, press for a brief
sampling of radio stations or CD
tracks. Press and hold again to
stop.
In MP3 mode, Press and release to view the next 12 characters in the
MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all
tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.
In satellite radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the
Satellite text message.
Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press and
hold again to stop.
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to
increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is
turned back on.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.
To load a CD/MP3 disc to a
specific slot, press LOAD and
select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press
and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label
side up.
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way
to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone
output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable
to the AIJ in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded
into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in
the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it
may be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with
devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.
Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all
players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound
best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the
vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough
to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the
vehicle is in motion.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Information Booklet for audio system warranty
information. If service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda
dealership.
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle.
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels
over the internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.
Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such
programming changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
Condition
Action Required
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Internal module or
system failure
SAT FAULT
If this message does
not clear within a short
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
present.
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL
Channel no longer
available.
This previously
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
UNSUBSCRIBED
NO TEXT
Subscription not
available for this
channel.
channel or tune to
another channel.
Artist information not Artist information not
available.
available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO TEXT
Condition
Action Required
Song title information Song title information
not available.
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO TEXT
Category information
not available.
Category information
not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
You are in a location
that is blocking the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment:
Controls the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe”
using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment:
Controls the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the
instrument panel vents only. Temperature of airflow not adjustable.
A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument
panel vents only.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF position.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the highest fan speed.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The foglamps can be turned on
when the headlamp control is in
the
or
position and the
high beams are not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light
on the headlamp
control and in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
High beams
After turning the headlamps on,
push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) (if equipped) system does not activate the parking lights
or side marker lights and generally may not provide adequate
lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
switch from the full dim position to the full Dome/ON position to reset.
This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the
assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have
problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by
a qualified service technician.
Headlamp aim adjustment
The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be
aimed visually by doing the following:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam
pattern.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
• (5) Center of headlamps
• (6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is
marked either on the lens (a
circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp
(mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your
headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long
horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape
works well).
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
3. Turn on the low beam
headlamps and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the
top edge of the intensity zone
even with the horizontal
reference line (4). If the top
edge of the high intensity area
is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to
adjust it.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster for
each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by using a 4 mm wrench to turn
the adjuster control either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of
vertical lines (5) must be
marked at the center line of the
headlamps on the wall or
screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with
the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If
the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical
line, follow the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster
for each headlamp. Use a 4 mm
wrench, turning it clockwise or
counterclockwise, to place the
left edge of the high intensity
area even with the vertical line
corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped)
The courtesy lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is held up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility.
NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Function
Number of
Trade number
bulbs
Park/turn/side marker lamps (front)
Headlamps
Fog lamps (if equipped)
Hi-mount brake lamp
Rear stop/tail lamps
Rear turn lamps
Rear license plate lamps
Backup lamps
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
3157 A (amber)
9007
9006
922
4157K or 3157K
3156
194
3155
912
904
904
Dome lamp
Map/dome-SuperCab (if equipped)
Map/dome-Regular Cab (if equipped)
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:
• Courtesy/Reading lamp
For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper
tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with
this, visit your local Mazda dealer.
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.
2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the
electrical connector.
3. Locate the bulb retaining ring
behind the headlamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring
by turning it counterclockwise
and remove the old bulb by
gently pulling it straight back
out of the lamp assembly. Keep
the retaining ring to retain the
new bulb.
To install the new bulb:
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear
safety glasses while handling bulbs.
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the
glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn
the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the
bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear
of the lamp assembly.
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts
the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps,
locking it into position.
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you
should not need to align it again.
Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the screw from lamp
assembly.
3. Disengage lamp assembly by
pulling it straight forward. It has
a snap fit.
4. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
from lamp assembly.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out
of socket and push in the new
bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
7. Align the lamp on the vehicle
and push to snap in place.
8. Install the screw on lamp assembly.
Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup
lamp bulbs
These bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly,
one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp assembly from vehicle.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
from lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and
secure with four screws.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. Remove the bulb socket from
the fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp
bulb.
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp
To remove the brake lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and
lamp assembly from vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from
lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
To install the brake lamp assembly:
1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise.
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper
to locate the bulb socket.
2. Twist the socket
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull out the old bulb from
socket and push in the new
bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers
(from desired interval to low or high
speed position); rotate towards you
to decrease the speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe several times with
washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will happen a few seconds
after washing the front window to clear any water that is dripping down
from the top of the windshield caused by the washing.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock
the steering wheel in position.
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of
control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment with
cassette/compact disc storage
• Cupholders
• Flip up armrest
WARNING: Use only soft cups
in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The auxiliary power points are
located on the instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working, a
fuse may have blown. Refer to Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
and Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse
ratings and information on checking and replacing fuses.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Push down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up and hold the switch to
close.
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Push the switch completely
down to the second detent and
release quickly. The window will
open fully. Momentarily press the
switch to any position to stop the
window operation.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power mirror control (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and
rotate the control
counterclockwise to adjust the
left mirror.
2. Move the control in the
direction you wish to tilt the
mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral)
with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle
or cause engine system damage.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and
release it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator light
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
on the
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or
• Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped).
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
• Press and release the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to reduce a
set speed:
• Press and hold the CST - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
• Press and release the CST -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal (if equipped) until
the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control
There are three ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
• Turn OFF the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
Note: Fully depressing the clutch
pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle.
This is normal.
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Activating overdrive
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Deactivating overdrive
Press the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) located on the end of
the gearshift lever. The O/D Off
O/D
ON/OFF
indicator light will illuminate on the
instrument cluster. The transmission
will operate in all gears except overdrive.
To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control
Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will
automatically return to normal
(Overdrive) mode.
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission
Operation section of the Driving chapter.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend
the pickup box for larger loads.
To extend the bed extender:
1. Lower tailgate.
2. Pull the lever on each side of
the bed extender to release it
from the pickup box.
3. Lift the bed extender over onto
the tailgate.
4. Evenly push down on the bed
extender and push the lever in
on each side locking it in place.
To stow the bed extender, follow
steps one through four in reverse
order.
The bed extender may be used to
secure a load of up to 100 lb.
(46 kg) on the tailgate.
The bed extender should always
be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not
in use.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Activating bed extender Theft
Deterrent Device:
The following procedure can be
done with the bed extender in the
stowed or extended position.
1. Locate the Phillips head screw
in the middle of the vertical
brace in front of the locking
clip.
2. Turn the screw
counterclockwise until you hear an audible click.
3. To deactivate, turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves
freely.
To remove the bed extender:
1. Extend the bed extender.
2. Pull the lever on each side of
the bed extender to unlock it.
Make sure the locking clip screws
are loose before removing the bed
extender.
3. Press the locking clips below
the middle bar and lift the bed
extender out of the channels on
the “D” pillar.
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an
emergency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft
system, your keys are coded to your vehicle; using a non-coded key will
not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied keys,
replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the control to unlock or lock
all the doors.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
doors.
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
Locking the doors
• Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash
once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the
lamps will not flash.
is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will
• If
flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and
closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will
chirp twice.
Car finder
Press
twice within 3 seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn lamps
will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate your
vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps
will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3
minutes.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the
two halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring.
DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER
COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD
OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF
THE REMOTE ENTRY
TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the
back surface of the circuit
board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not
depressed during this sequence.
4
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
3
1
5
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 2
(LOCK) position to 3 (OFF).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)
position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON)
position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start
the procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if
they are left on accidentally.
SECURILOCK™ PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock™ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in
the instrument cluster.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system
behave as follows:
• When the ignition is in the 1(OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the
SecuriLock™ system is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the
SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock™ Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will
not flash.
• When the igniton is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use Securilock™ keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
1. Insert a previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
4
2. Turn the ignition from the 3
(OFF) position to the 4 (ON)
position. Keep the ignition in
the 4 (ON) position for at least
one second, but no more than
10 seconds.
3
1
5
2
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF)
position, and remove the coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the
ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but
not more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second
key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed
coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the
ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
from Step 1 for each additional key.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving. The seat could slide too far leaving you
unable to operate vital controls just when you need them.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a
reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you cannot get the full protection from seat belts.
During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the
lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum
protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the
seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly
and as low as possible.
WARNING: The passenger sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the
seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the
floor.
Lift the release bar to move seat
forward or backward. Ensure that
the seat is locked into place.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Pull lever located at the side of the
seat cushion up to adjust seatback.
60/40 seat (if equipped)
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest (if
equipped), lift the latch to open lid.
The 60/40 seat cupholder (if
equipped) is detachable for
cleaning.
• Firmly grasp the bottom of the
cup holder and pull up.
To re-attach:
• Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60%
driver’s seat.
• Press down until it is firmly latched into place.
Passenger side rear access (if equipped)
Pull up on the recliner handle. The
seat will lean forward. Lift the
release bar to move the seat forward
to access the rear area of the cab.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push
the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have
to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position.
REAR SEATS
Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped)
To open, pull seat assembly down,
then raise seatback.
To stow the seat, fold seat back
down and raise seat assembly to the
fully upright position.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in the center facing
jump seats as there are no
child restraints recommended
for use in this seating position.
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard seat belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors, and seat belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), seat belt
pretensioners, front seat belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a
crash, the RCM activates the seat belt pretensioners and/or either none,
one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and seat belt pretensioners.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by seat belts or child safety seats and
they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to
reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are
properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the
front.
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under
in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger
seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after
a collision.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat belt usage sensors
The front seat belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger seat belts are fastened. This information allows
your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment and seat
belt pretensioner activation depending upon seat belt usage. Refer to
Seat belt usage sensors later in this chapter.
Front outboard seat belt pretensioners
The seat belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the seat belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions. This helps increase the effectiveness of the seat
belts. In frontal collisions, the seat belt pretensioners can be activated
alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
Front outboard seat belt energy management retractors
The front seat belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
on the occupant. Refer to Energy management retractors section in
this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System™ uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
seat belt pretensioners, front seat belt buckle sensors, front passenger
sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM
also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster. A
difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is stopped.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do
not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
seat belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the seat belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a
single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: On Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the rear door
when the rear seat belt is still buckled.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) until
you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue
from the buckle.
Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as
possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to
position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an
accident.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle.
To tighten the belt, pull the loose
end of the belt through the tongue
until it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt
when not in use to keep the belt
away from door openings and
available after unfolding the
seats.
For the rear jump seat, shorten and
fold the belt into the seat when not
in use.
Energy Management Feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• This energy management system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard seat belt has two types
of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination seat belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating
position only) for use with child safety seats
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seat belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat.
Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children
later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger
seating position only) for use with child safety seats
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire seat belt
system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized
dealer. Verify that the ؆automatic locking retractors” in all
outboard seating positions are functioning properly.
Additionally check that the ؆automatic locking mode؆ feature
for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position
is functioning properly.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not
operating properly when checked according to the procedures in
Workshop Manual.
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with seat belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The seat belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing
from the seat belt system. The seat belt pretensioner uses the same
crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS). When the seat belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap
and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Seat belt maintenance
section in this chapter.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger seat belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags and seat belt pretensioners.
Front seat belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has seat belt height adjustments for the driver and front
passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Regular Cab and four–door Cab
Plus 4
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, slide the height
adjuster up. Pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
WARNING: Position the seat belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the seat belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Seat belt extension assembly
If the seat belt is too short when fully extended, a 9 inch (23 cm) or
12 inch (31 cm) seat belt extension assembly can be added (part
numbers 611C22–A and 611C22–B respectively). Seat belt extension
assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the seat belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the
label. Also, use the seat belt extension only if the seat belt is too short
for you when fully extended.
When you are not using the extensions store them in another location so
that no one will accidentally use them.
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Seat belt maintenance
Inspect the seat belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged.
NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an
authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the seat belts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check
the automatic locking retractor on the passenger outboard seating
position. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat
belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on
seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if
equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision.
Mazda recommends that all seat belt assemblies used in vehicles involved
in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seat
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so
the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the
pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of
whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the seat
belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
Seat belt warning light and indicator chime
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their seat belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s seat belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The seat belt warning light illuminates
1-2 minutes and the warning chime
sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s seat belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s seat belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The seat belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The seat belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Belt-Minderா
The Belt-Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the seat belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the seat belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s seat belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front passenger’s The Belt-Minder feature will not
seat belts are buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned ON...
activate.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
The Belt-Minder feature is
seat belt is not buckled when the activated - the seat belt warning
vehicle has reached at least 3 mph light illuminates and the warning
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition switch
has been turned to ON...
chime sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
the seat belts are buckled.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If...
Then...
The driver’s or front passenger’s
seat belt becomes unbuckled for
The Belt-Minder feature is
activated - the seat belt warning
approximately 1 minute while the light illuminates and the warning
vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph chime sounds for 6 seconds every
(5 km/h) and more than 1-2
30 seconds, repeating for
minutes have elapsed since the
approximately 5 minutes or until
ignition switch has been turned to the seat belts are buckled.
ON...
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing seat belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
ЉCrashes are rare 36,700 crashes occur every day. The more we
eventsЉ
drive, the more we are exposed to ЉrareЉ events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
ЉI’m not going farЉ 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
ЉBelts are
uncomfortableЉ
Seat belts are designed to enhance comfort. If you
are uncomfortable - try different positions for the
seat belt upper anchorage and seatback which
should be as upright as possible; this can improve
comfort.
ЉI was in a hurryЉ Prime time for an accident. Seat Belt Warning
Chime reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle
up.
ЉSeat belts don’t
workЉ
Seat belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
ЉTraffic is lightЉ
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
ЉBelts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothesЉ
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given... Consider...
ЉThe people I’m
with don’t wear
beltsЉ
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
ЉI have an airbagЉ Airbags offer greater protection when used with
seat belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
ЉI’d rather be
thrown clearЉ
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
times more likely to DIE. Seat belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T ЉPICK OUR CRASHЉ.
WARNING: Always wear the seat belt. Do not be tempted to sit
on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning
system. The seat belt and seat belt warning system are there to
protect your life.
One time disable
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles
the seat belt for that seating position, the Belt-Minder is disabled for
the current ignition cycle. The Belt-Minder feature will enable during
the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time
disable.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• The driver and front passenger seat belts are unbuckled
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances
of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend
you leave the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and
others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do
not deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder feature while driving
the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the seat belt warning light turns off. (Approximately
1 minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle
then unbuckle the seat belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the seat belt
warning light turns off.)
• After Step 3, the seat belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
4. Within approximately 7 seconds of the light turning off, buckle then
unbuckle the seat belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the seat belt warning light will
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the
light off, then followed by the seat belt warning light flashing 4 times
per second for 3 seconds again.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in
conjunction with the seat belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the seat belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the
inflators and airbags).
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the
Personal Safety System section in this chapter.
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions
The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the seat belt
to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT
inflate slowly or gently and the
risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is greatest close to the
trim covering the airbag
module. Always wear your seat
belt.
WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in
front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in
a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you
should make sure that the passenger airbag is off. If the child
safety seat is in the outboard seating position, slide the seat all
the way back.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in a center facing
jump seat.
WARNING: Rear facing child
seats should NEVER be placed
in front of an active airbag.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their seat belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm
(10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag
module.
WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures
or other injuries.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your
authorized Mazda dealership.
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks
and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front
end of the vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance
of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional
equipment.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in a center facing
jump seat.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be
burned.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.
WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including seat belt pretensioners)
For disposal of seat belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped
vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician.
Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s
frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver’s frontal air bag is not
part of the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing
system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and
seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly
seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a rear-facing
child seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat (if
equipped).
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the Љpassenger air bag offЉ or
Љpass air bag offЉ indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the
front passenger frontal air bag is off. When the front passenger seat is
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger
frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.
The indicator light is located in the
center stack of the instrument
panel. To confirm the Љpass airbag
lightЉ is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON
position.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front
passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the
air bag is enabled (may inflate).
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
Љpassenger air bag offЉ or Љpass air bag offЉ indicator is lit, it could be
that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should
be advised to ride in the back seat.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat
Small child in child safety
seat or booster
Unlit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Small child with seat belt
buckled or unbuckled
Adult
Lit
Disabled
Unlit
Enabled
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seat belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system,
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the
floor.
In case there is a problem with the
passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit. Do
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to the dealer.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could
affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this Owner’s Manual.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ light may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Objects
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. 3 ring binder,
small purse, bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small to
medium object with seat
belt buckled
Unlit
Disabled
Lit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the
U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster
seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children
in your vehicle.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any
infant or child restraint you might use.
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump
seat.
Children and seat belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear seat belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal
unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather,
temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause
brain damage or even death. Always take all children and
animals with you or leave a responsible person with them.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous.
This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.
They could play with power windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle
with children.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a
belt-positioning booster seat.
Booster seats position a child so that seat belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, use a
high-backed booster seat.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb..
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with combination lap/shoulder belts.
WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or
behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the
upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a
child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of
injury or death in a collision.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
• Use the correct seat belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump
seat.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the seat belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front seat).
• Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg)
in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children
up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a
belt-positioning booster.
Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts (front outboard passenger seat only)
1. Position the child safety seat in
a seat with a combination lap
and shoulder belt.
WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach
it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps in this chapter.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
front of an active airbag.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder
belt and lap belt together.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route
the tongue through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear
and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp
the shoulder portion of the belt
and pull downward until all of
the belt is extracted and a click
is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle
and pull up on the shoulder belt
while pushing down with knee
on the child seat.
8. Allow the seat belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat
forward and back to make sure
the seat is securely held in
place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be
no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat
Steps two through nine.
11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front
seat cushion.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• Bucket seats
• 60/40 seats
WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate
tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a
single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
The tether anchor is located on the
rear lower portion of the passenger
seat.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor.
WARNING: If the tether strap
is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event
of a collision.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Center seating location 60/40 seats with folding armrest
When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether
strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor.
WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a
collision.
5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further
instructions to secure the child safety seat.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants
must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury
or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Manual and any supplements for specific
information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and
additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make
sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ؆blowout؆, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and
internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to
be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label
or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi
(4.15 bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar
Spare Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and
maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their
lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of
tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and
may require tires to be replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road
tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been
used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these
labels then you should consult your Mazda dealer. Use of any
tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the
following precautions must be taken to protect the person
mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum
pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor
Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire
and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.
The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an
ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the
time they are installed.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing
better tire performance and longer tire life.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans
and light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,
polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your
vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for
service on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service
on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly)
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase
the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to
Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Check your tire pressure to
ensure tires are properly
inflated; refer to Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to
the manufacturer’s
recommended inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for
at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the
light will turn OFF.
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on
the vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
on how the system functions,
refer to When your temporary
spare tire is installed in this
section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the light
remains ON, have the system
inspected by your authorized
dealer.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Flashing Warning
Light
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description
of how the system functions
under these conditions, refer to
When your temporary spare
tire is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly
inflated and your spare tire is
not in use and the TPMS
warning light still flashes, have
the system inspected by your
authorized dealer.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS
warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is
ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.
NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and
specifications as those originally installed.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•
Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the wheels.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains for
you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in snow
and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against the
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the
cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage. Have the cables or
chains fitted by a professional before proceeding.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG
DATE: XX/XX
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL
XXXXKG
REAR GAWR:
XXXXKG
XXXXLB
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
WITH
TIRES
WITH
TIRES
RIMS
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
RIMS
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TYPE: XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EXT PNT:
XX
INT TR
RC: XX
AXLE
XX
DSO:
WB BRK
TP/PS
R
X
TR SPR
XXXXX
XXX
XXX
X
XX
X
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x
150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Manual.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully after any towing operation.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
Maximum
frontal area
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2
(kg)
(m2)
Regular Cab
4,800 (2,177)
2.3L
All
1,600 (725) Equal to frontal
area of vehicle
3.0L*
3.0L* Dual
Sport
3.73
4.10
6,000 (2,722) 2,640 (1,197)
6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
Cab Plus 4
2.3L
All
4,800 (2,177)
1,440 (653) Equal to frontal
area of vehicle
3.0L*
3.0L* Dual
Sport
3.73
4.10
6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152)
6,000 (2,722) 2,320 (1,052)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
4.0L
4.0L Dual
Sport
All
All
7,000 (3,175) 3,420 (1,551)
7,000 (3,175) 3,260 (1,478)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier
in this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle, see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed
towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded
trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x4 w/manual transmission
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
Maximum
frontal area
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2
(kg)
(m2)
Regular Cab
3.0L*
4.0L
All
All
6,000 (2,722) 2,360 (1,070)
7,000 (3,175) 3,300 (1,496)
Cab Plus 4
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
4.0L
All
7,000 (3,175) 3,140 (1,424)
50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) of elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in
this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed
towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded
trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
Maximum
frontal area
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2
(kg)
(m2)
Regular Cab
2.3L
All
5,500 (2,495) 2,260 (1,025) Equal to frontal
area of vehicle
3.0L*
3.0L* Dual
Sport
3.73
4.10
6,000 (2,722) 2,600 (1,179)
6,000 (2,722) 2,400 (1,088)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
Maximum
frontal area
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2
(kg)
(m2)
Cab Plus 4
5,500 (2,495)
2.3L
4.10
2,100 (953) Equal to frontal
area of vehicle
3.0L*
3.0L* Dual
Sport
3.73
4.10
6,000 (2,722) 2,440 (1,106)
6,000 (2,722) 2,280 (1,034)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
4.0L
4.0L Dual
Sport
All
All
9,500 (4,309) 5,880 (2,667)
9,500 (4,309) 5,720 (2,594)
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier
in this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
4x4 w/automatic transmission
Engine
Rear
axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
Maximum
frontal area
weight - lb. of trailer - ft2
(kg)
(m2)
Regular Cab
3.0L*
4.0L
3.73
All
6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061)
9,500 (4,309) 5,760 (2,612)
Cab Plus 4
50 (4.64)
50 (4.64)
4.0L
All
9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540)
50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft.
(300 meters) of elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in
this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch
and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the
underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for
trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg).
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch
which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if
they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable
rental agency.
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all
mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious
gases or water from entering.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper
The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires
only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight
capability.
The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the
factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed
directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either
lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will
significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This
can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse.
Trailer tow connector
The trailer tow connector is located
under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:
Trailer tow connector
Color
Function
Comment
1. Dark Green
Trailer right-hand
turn signal
Circuit activated when brake
pedal is depressed or when
ignition is on and right-hand
turn signal is applied.
2. Yellow
Trailer left-hand turn Circuit activated when brake
signal
pedal is depressed or when
ignition is on and left-hand
turn signal is applied.
Relay controlled circuit
activated when the park
lamps/headlamps are on.
Matching vehicle circuit
returns to battery’s negative
ground.
3. Tan/White
4. White
Tail lamp
Ground
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle
starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the
Driving chapter.)
• Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside
temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate
higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed
until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to
Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these
guidelines for recreational towing:
Before you have your vehicle towed:
• Release the parking brake.
• Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
• The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h).
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transmission components.
For 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission, it is recommended that a
Neutral Tow Kit be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if
the vehicle is towed frequently.
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions
provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing
apparatus if one has been installed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these
guidelines for recreational towing:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.
• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
For 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission, a Neutral Tow Kit must
be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if a distance of
50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded.
For 4x2 vehicles with an automatic transmission, if a distance of 50 miles
(80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded, you must
disconnect the rear driveshaft. It is recommended that the driveshaft be
removed/installed only by an authorized dealer. See your authorized
dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case
components.
CAMPER BODIES
Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the
electrical accessories such as
the radio to operate while the
engine is not running.
4
3
1
5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, you must
depress the ignition release
lever to release the key.
2
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission
shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake
pedal being depressed.
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking
brake.
Note: On some vehicles, when the key is in the OFF position, the
brake-shift interlock feature will prevent the automatic transmission shift
lever from being moved out of the P (Park) position without the brake
pedal being depressed.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of
radio noise.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding
against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive
if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their seat belts. For more
information on seat belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.
3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
4
3
5
2
1
If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel
left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:
• front wheels are turned
• front wheel is against the curb
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START). If
4
there is difficulty in turning the
3
key, rotate the steering wheel
until the key turns freely. This
condition may occur when:
5
2
• the front wheels are turned
• a front wheel is against the curb
1
Turn the key to 5 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive
if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a/c electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-17°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s laboratory (UL ) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked ЉSuitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.Љ Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of energy per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately 3 hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than 3
hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use
additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). A noise
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be
observed during ABS braking events and the brake pedal may suddenly
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake
operation resumes. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking
under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is
normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake
system.
NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and
begin to drive away.
A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If
a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time
necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping
distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to stop.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
!
P
BRAKE
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
Note: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Pull the release lever to release the
brake.
Driving with the parking brake
on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading
• High crown in center of road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Loose or worn suspension components
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with
a lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure
to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at
slower speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing
for increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle. Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can
deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking
brake.
Note: On some vehicles, when the key is in the OFF position, the
brake-shift interlock feature will prevent the automatic transmission shift
lever from being moved out of the P (Park) position without the brake
pedal being depressed.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the
gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not
hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly
and injure someone.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through
O/D
ON/OFF
five.
(Overdrive) can be
deactivated by pressing the
transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever.
This will illuminate the O/D OFF
lamp and activate Drive.
O/D
OFF
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
1
2
3
4
5
R
Using the clutch
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
the full extension of the clutch pedal.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission
components or damage the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a
hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended shift speeds
Downshift according to the following charts for your specific
engine/drivetrain combination:
Upshifts
Transfer case position (if equipped)
Shift from:
2WD and 4H
4L
1 -2
2 - 3
10 mph (16 km/h)
19 mph (26 km/h)
4 mph (6 km/h)
8 mph (10 km/h)
3 - 4
4 - 5 (Overdrive)
28 mph (43 km/h) 12 mph (16 km/h)
40 mph (68 km/h) 16 mph (26 km/h)
Maximum downshift speeds
Transfer case position (if equipped)
2WD and 4H 4L
Shift from:
5 (Overdrive) - 4
55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h)
35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h)
4 - 3
3 - 2
2 - 1
20 mph (32 km/h)
8 mph (11 km/h)
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
3. Turn the ignition off.
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set
the parking brake fully.
Removing the key
Turn the ignition off, push the
release lever (located above the
ignition), then turn the key toward
you and remove the key.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper
operation.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
4WD system indicator lights
• 4x4 - Momentarily illuminates
when the vehicle is started.
Illuminates when 4H (4WD High)
is engaged.
4x4
• 4x4 LOW – Momentarily
illuminates when the vehicle is
started. Illuminates when 4L
(4WD Low) is engaged.
4x4
LOW
Using the electronic shift 4WD system
4H
2H
4L
2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and
highway driving.
4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand,
steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage
while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)
• Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at a stop or any forward
speed.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
2. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, depress the clutch.
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
• If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.
• If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.
Driving off-road with 4WD
Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly
on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Note: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator light may
illuminate depending on how much air is released from your tires and/or
how long you drive the vehicle under these conditions
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage.
Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the
life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required.
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up,
straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the
other side of a hill before driving over the crest.
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting
to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This
reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear
when added engine braking is desired.
When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed
may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load.
If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control
will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal.
If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing
and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph
[50 km/h]).
Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep
grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of
a lower gear.
(Overdrive) into
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving on snow and ice
A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady
pressure on the brake pedal.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located on the right side of the
passenger footwell, behind the fuse
panel door.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset
the switch by pushing in on the
reset button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
15
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
—
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the
right-hand side of the instrument
panel behind the kick panel. A fuse
puller tool is located near the lower
right corner of the fuse box; this
tool will assist you in pulling the
fuses out for inspection, if
necessary.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Location
Rating
5A
10A
10A
10A
5A
Description
Instrument panel dimmer switch
Trailer tow park lamps
Right low beam headlamp
Left low beam headlamp
Windshield wiper module (RUN/ACCY)
Radio (RUN/ACCY), Door switch
illumination
1
2
3
4
5
6
10A
7
8
5A
10A
Not used (spare)
Restraints Control Module (RCM), PADI
(Passenger Air bag Deactivation
Indicator), Occupant Classification
Sensor (OCS)
9
5A
Cluster air bag indicator
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
10
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Rating
Description
Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4 module
(RUN/START)
10A
11
12
10A
15A
Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic
power)
Audiophile subwoofer amplifier,
Satellite radio
13
14
15A
15A
Horn, Interior lamps
High beam headlamp, High beam
indicator (cluster)
15
16
—
Not used
30A cartridge Power windows
fuse
17
18
19
15A
—
20A
Turn signals/Hazards
Not used
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)/Stop lamps
20
10A
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module,
Speed control module, Back-up lamps,
Overdrive cancel switch, Electronic
flasher (turn/hazard)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
5A
5A
30A
20A
—
Starter relay coil
Radio (START)
Headlamps (low and high beam)
Radio battery feed (B+)
Accessory relay (power windows)
Redundant cruise switch
Climate control blower relay/blend
doors
2A
10A
28
29
15A
20A
4x4 module battery feed (B+)
Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector
(OBD II)
30
5A
Power mirrors
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
31
Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Rating
Description
Front park lamps, Rear park lamps,
License plate lamps, Dimmer switch,
Trailer tow park lamps
Brake switch (logic), Brake-shift
interlock
20A
32
5A
33
34
35
5A
20A
15A
Instrument cluster battery feed (B+)
Power point
Power locks
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
2.3L engine (if equipped)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Location
Rating
40A**
—
1
2
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
3
4
40A**
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
5
6
50A**
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
7
8
30A**
—
Starter solenoid
Not used
9
40A**
—
30A**
—
30A**
—
Ignition switch
Not used
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay
Not used
Blower motor (climate control)
Not used
10
11
12
13
14
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Rating
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
—
—
40A**
—
20A**
—
10A*
Not used
Not used
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
Not used
Engine fan
Not used
PCM keep alive power, Canister purge
valve solenoid
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
—
30A*
—
10A*
—
—
—
30A*
—
—
—
30A*
—
—
—
Not used
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors
Not used
A/C clutch solenoid
Not used
Not used
Not used
Wipers/washer
Not used
Not used
Not used
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow (right turn)
PCM power
Not used
Automatic transmission
Trailer tow (left turn)
Engine fan relay coil, A/C relay, Engine
sensors, VMV solenoid
—
7.5A*
15A*
—
10A*
7.5A*
20A*
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Location
Rating
15A*
—
44
Ignition coil, Capacitor
Not used
Not used
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay
Not used
45A
45B
46A
46B
47
—
—
—
—
Engine fan relay
Starter relay
Not used
48
49
—
—
50
—
Not used
51
—
Not used
52
—
Not used
53
—
Not used
54
—
PCM relay
55
56A
56B
—
—
—
Blower relay
A/C clutch solenoid relay
Not used
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Location
Rating
40A**
—
1
2
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
3
4
40A**
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
5
6
50A**
—
Passenger compartment fuse panel
Not used
7
8
30A**
—
Starter solenoid
Not used
9
10
11
40A**
—
30A**
Ignition switch
Not used
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay
fuse
12
13
14
—
30A**
—
Not used
Blower motor (climate control)
Not used
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Location
Rating
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
—
—
40A**
—
—
Not used
Not used
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
Not used
Not used
—
10A*
Not used
PCM keep alive power, Canister purge
valve solenoid
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
—
30A*
—
10A*
—
20A*
—
30A*
—
15A*
—
30A*
—
—
—
Not used
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors
Not used
A/C clutch solenoid
Not used
4x4 module
Not used
Wipers/washer
Not used
Foglamps
Not used
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow (right turn)
PCM power
Not used
Automatic transmission
Trailer tow (left turn)
A/C relay coil, Engine sensors, VMV
solenoid, EGR solenoid, Heated PCV
—
7.5A*
15A*
—
10A*
7.5A*
20A*
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp Power Distribution Box Description
Rating
44
15A*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ignition coil, Capacitor
Not used
Not used
A/C clutch solenoid
Not used
PCM relay
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay
Fog lamp relay
Not used
Not used
Not used
45A
45B
46A
46B
47
48A
48B
51
52
53
54
55
Not used
Blower relay
Starter relay
56
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of
the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensor, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire
has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph
(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and place
gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or 1
(First) (manual transmission).
2. Set the parking brake and turn
engine OFF.
Location of the spare tire and tools
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of
the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent
damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Tool
Spare tire
Location
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper
Jack, jack handle, Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the
wheel nut wrench jack and tools cover
Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind the front seats,
between jump seats and underneath jack and
tools cover. The lug wrench is held in place with
a wingnut.
Key, spare tire lock In the glove box
(if equipped)
Removing the spare tire
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the
illustrations.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following:
• one handle extension and one
typical extension. To assemble,
slide parts together. To
disconnect, depress button and
pull apart.
• one wheel nut wrench. Depress
button and slide together.
2. If equipped, unlock and remove
the spare tire carrier lock from
the rear access hole located just
above the rear bumper and
below the tailgate.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
3. Insert the square end of the
jack handle into the rear access
hole located just above the rear
bumper and below the tailgate.
Forward motion will stop and
resistance to turning will be felt
when properly engaged.
4. Turn the handle
counterclockwise until tire is
lowered to the ground and the
cable is slightly slack.
5. Remove the retainer from the
spare tire.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual
transmission).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Insert tapered end of the lug
wrench behind hub caps and
twist them off.
3. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise
but do not remove them until
the wheel is raised off the
ground.
4. Position the jack according to
the following guides and turn
the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch
(25 mm) off the ground.
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack
is only meant for changing the tire.
WARNING: Do not let anyone stay in the vehicle when you are
using the jack; have them stand in a safe place out of traffic
lanes.
• Front
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Rear
Never use the differential as a
jacking point. It is too easy for
the vehicle to tilt or fall and you
can be injured.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts with
the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall
the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the
wheel has been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts, in the
order shown. Refer to Wheel
lug nut torque specifications
later in this chapter for the
proper lug nut torque
1
3
4
specification.
9. Stow the flat tire. Refer to
5
2
Stowing the spare tire.
10. Stow the jack and lug wrench.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.
11. Unblock the wheels.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and
retainer through the center of the wheel.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your
earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen
and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire
may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or
at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above the
rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket size/Bolt
size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
N•m
3
Lug nut socket size: ⁄4 inch
100
135
(19 mm) hex
1
Bolt size: ⁄2 x 20
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake
drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they
do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
OVERHEATING
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience
power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is
probably too hot.
If this happens:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual
transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.
3. Turn off the air conditioner.
WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The
escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY
after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.
4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or
from the engine compartment.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near
the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch
to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling
fans will start to cool the engine.
• If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle
the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop
the engine and let it cool.
5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator
hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and
water pump.
If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the
engine and call an authorized dealer.
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the
engine and radiator are hot.
See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If
you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious,
carefully add coolant as required.
Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have
the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged
unless repairs are made.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other
moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight
and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and
the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers
or the intake manifold as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North
American Operations by one of the following ways:
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom
of the home page).
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional
Office nearest you for such arrangements.
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual
for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date.
5. Present odometer reading.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence
therefore for most effective results.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an
independent third party through binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Regional Offices
Regional Offices
Mazda Canada Inc.
Western Region
8171 Ackroyd Road
Suite 2000
Areas Covered
Alberta,
British Columbia,
Manitoba,
Richmond, B.C.
V6X 3K1
Saskatchewan,
Yukon
(604) 303–5670
Mazda Canada Inc.
Central Region
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario.
L4B 3K5
Ontario
1 (800) 263–4680
Mazda Canada Inc.
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region
6111 Route Trans
Canadienne
Quebec,
New Brunswick,
Nova Scotia,
Pointe Claire, Quebec
H9R 5A5
Prince Edward Island,
Newfoundland
(514) 694–6390
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,
Attn: Customer Assistance
Plaza Motors Corp.
Mazda de Puerto Rico
P.O. Box 362722
San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936–2722
Tel: (787) 788–9300
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.
That is our goal.
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or
safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Mazda North American Operations
7755, Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)
(Distributor in each area)
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
CANADA
Mazda Canada, Inc.
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)
PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722
TEL: (787) 788–9300
GUAM
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam
TEL: (671) 646–9216
SAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234–7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
Beach Road
Chalan LauLau
Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 235–4868
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699–1854
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
• Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
• Federal Emission Control Warranty
– Emission Defect Warranty
– Emission Performance Warranty
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
• California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)
• Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
• Tire Warranty
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda
portfolio.
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in
other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of the United States:
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of Canada:
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could
seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your
chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential
systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag
(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be
very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical
equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo
systems, and car alarm systems.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, refer to the chart below.
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
9999 95 022B 06
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
WORKSHOP MANUAL
WIRING DIAGRAM
9999 95 020G 06
9999 95 023C 06
OWNER’S MANUAL
WORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive
train, body and chassis.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the
entire electrical system.
OWNER’S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely
maintain Mazda vehicles.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash, or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Mazda Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mazda Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more
detailed information.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda
dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water
will damage the engine or other engine components.
• Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at
your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and
pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• 2.3L Engine
2.3L
16 VALVE
• 3.0L Engine
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
• 4.0L Engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH
shampoo.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your
authorized Mazda dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a
windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
INSTRUMENT PANEL / INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the interior trim areas and instrument panel with a damp cloth,
then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (0000-77-430E-15).
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the
finish.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel, instrument panel or interior
trim areas to avoid contamination of the airbag systems.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and seat belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot
Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your
authorized Mazda dealer.
• If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
INTRODUCTION
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage
to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you
to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably
an authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for
your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been
designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete,
and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to
vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been
performed as prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as
opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will
not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original
equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it
always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine
Mazda parts.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control
Systems
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the
following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
• Repeated short-distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Towing a trailer.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
• Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.
• High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle.
• Off-road operation.
NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described
maintenance at the recommended intervals.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
CHART SYMBOLS
I: Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace
A Adjust
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances
shown, whichever occurs first.
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44
48
60
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 km)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
ENGINE
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter
PCV valve
*3
AIR CLEANER
Air cleaner filter
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
R
R
*4
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant (yellow)
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
or 36 months
Coolant condition and protection,
hoses and clamps — annually —
prior to cold weather every 12
months
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS AND BODY
Wheel lug nut torque
*1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X
= recommended interval for optimal
tire life)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level
Front wheel bearings (4x2)
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44
48
60
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 km)
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Disc brake system
Caliper slide rails
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,
looseness
I
I
Manual transmission fluid
Automatic
transmission fluid
*2
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for
trapped material)
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped
with grease fittings)
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage
and operation)
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)
I/L
I/L
I/L
I/L
Transfer case fluid (4x4)
Rear axle lubricant
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Does not require replacement unless rear axle
submerged in water
Accessory drive belts
Fuel filter
*5
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension and driveshaft
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and
gap specifications.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
Schedule 1 continued
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92
96
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 km)
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
(104) (112) (121) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)
ENGINE
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter
PCV valve
*3
AIR CLEANER
Air cleaner filter
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
R
R
*4
R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant (yellow)
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
or 36 months
Coolant condition and protection,
I
I
I
I
hoses and clamps — annually —prior
to cold weather every 12 months
CHASSIS AND BODY
Wheel lug nut torque
*1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X
= recommended interval for optimal
tire life)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level
Front wheel bearings (4x2)
Disc brake system
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Caliper slide rails
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
(104) (112) (121) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)
96
Maintenance Item
x 1000 miles
(x 1000 km)
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,
looseness
I
I
Manual transmission fluid
R
Automatic
transmission fluid
*2
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for
trapped material)
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped
with grease fittings)
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage
and operation)
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)
I/L
I/L
I/L
I/L
Transfer case fluid (4x4)
Rear axle lubricant
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Does not require replacement unless rear axle
submerged in water
Accessory drive belts
I
Fuel filter
*5
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension and driveshaft
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and
gap specifications.
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the
following conditions:
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures
remain below freezing.
• Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads.
• Operating in severe dust conditions.
• Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service.
• High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW).
• Off-road operation
Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles
(4,800 km) whichever occurs first.
NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more
hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage
odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading
when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If
you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain
stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door
delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then
Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes
to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most
vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you
to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Special Operating
Conditions
3,000
miles or
3 months
Suggested Maintenance
Interval
5,000 15,000 30,000 60,000
miles miles miles miles required required required miles miles
As
As
As
30,000 60,000
Towing a trailer or
using a camper or
car top carrier
X
X
X
X
X
X
Extensive idling or
low-speed driving
for long distances
as in heavy
commercial use
such as delivery,
taxi or patrol car
X
X
X
X
X
X
Operating in dusty
conditions such as
unpaved or dusty
roads
X
X
X
X
Off road operation
X
X
For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or
qualified service professional.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner Maintenance Schedule
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle
inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable
operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or
qualified service technician as soon as possible.
While operating your vehicle
• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust
fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased
steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the
straight ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on a smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur,
check the transmission fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission Park function.
• Check parking brake.
At least monthly
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
• Check tires for wear and proper air pressure.
• Check engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.
• Check washer fluid level.
At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall)
• Check power steering fluid level.
• Check clutch fluid level (if equipped).
• Check and clean body and door drain holes.
• Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks.
• Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips.
• Check parking brake for proper operation.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function.
• Check air pressure in spare tire.
• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, seat belt) for
operation.
• Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is
correct for summer or winter conditions.
• Check battery water level (non-maintenance free).
• Check battery connections and clean if necessary.
Retightening lug nuts
• Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
• Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information”
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built
to provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
• Automatic transmission/transaxle:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission/transaxle:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
• Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
• Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in
N (Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is
running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under
the bottom of the instrument
panel near the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle
and release the auxiliary latch
that is located under the front
center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it
with the prop rod.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
9. Battery
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Air filter assembly
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
3.0L V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
9. Battery
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Air filter assembly
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4.0L SOHC V6 engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Power distribution box
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
8. Battery
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Air filter assembly
11. Engine coolant reservoir
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
E
H R
S
F
A
LU
W
ID
O
N
L
Y
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Mazda specification . Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
RADIATOR
COOLANT
ONLY
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking
and smearing. Refer to Refill
capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common
windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold
weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper
blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from
the vehicle. Turn the blade at an
angle from the wiper arm. Push
the lock pin manually to release
the blade and pull the wiper
blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from
the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into
place until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual
transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 2.3L I4 engine
MIN
MAX
• 3.0L V6 engine
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and
MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable,
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough
oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX
range.
• 2.3L I4 engine
SAE 5W-20
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L V6 engine
SAE 5W-20
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine
SAE 5W-30
• Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the
normal range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine Oil Recommendations
2.3L & 3.0L Engines
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in scheduled maintenance.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
4.0L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
scheduled maintenance.
Engine Oil Filter Recommendation
Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed
in scheduled maintenance. Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda)
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a
replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and
design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be
experienced.
Mazda production and replacement oil filters are designed for added
engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that
does not meet Mazda material and design specifications, start-up engine
noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter or another
with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Mazda maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,
sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When
working near the battery, always shield your face and protect
your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If
acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture
of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent
premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification.
A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant
provides:
• maximum cooling system efficiency.
• freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant
gauge.
The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level
and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid
level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to
the engine and cooling system may result.
• 2.3L engine
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L & 4.0L engines
When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
• Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid
mixing incompatible products.
• Refer to scheduled maintenance for service interval schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not
use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid
outside of its specified function and vehicle location.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine coolant
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.
• DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).
• DO NOT USE a DEX-COOL engine coolant or an equivalent
engine coolant.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
• DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.
• DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system.
• The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Engine coolant concentrations above 68% or below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the
2.3L I4 engines use the degas system.
WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being
released from the engine cooling system, never remove the
reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to
follow this warning may result in possible severe personal
injury and damage to the engine’s cooling system.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly
turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD”
level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow
system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is
almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking engine coolant. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda
specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet
Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and
disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may
result in possible personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling
excess fumes.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on
the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while
it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area/pickup bed).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove
it.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
If the check fuel cap lamp
or a “check fuel cap” message comes on,
the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. The lamp or message
can come on after several driving events after you’ve refueled your
vehicle.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off of the road, remove the fuel filler
cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
lamp
or “check fuel cap” message may not reset immediately; it may
or “check fuel
take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap lamp
cap” message to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up
(after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and
highway driving.
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap lamp
or “check fuel cap”
message on may cause the
lamp to turn on as well.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may
result in personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Cleaner air
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right
Fuel section.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than 1
gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles
(3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance product
specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in the scheduled maintenance section
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in
performance and durability.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the
indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission
warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
Examples are:
indicator to illuminate.
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
indicator should stay off
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving
with the
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle
is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
indicator blinks
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID
• 2.3L I4 engine
• 3.0L V6 engine
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 4.0L V6 engine
DR
O
N
O
LT
V
E
F
O
I
L
G N
I
D
I
F
E
R
P
U L
R
O
E
W
E
T
S
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section
for the service interval schedules.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, until it reaches
between the MIN and MAX lines. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid
type.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the “MIN” and
“MAX” lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance for the service
interval schedules.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step
in the reservoir.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification.
Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this
chapter.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product
label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a
physician or Poison Control Center immediately. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and
water from entering the
reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for scheduled check
and change intervals.
• Transmission does not consume fluid.
• Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see
a leak.
• Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
To check and add fluid:
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating
temperatures.
2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow
transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking.
3. Engage parking brake, start engine.
4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly
through all of the gear ranges.
5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag.
7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube.
8. Remove the dipstick and inspect
the fluid level. Level should be
in the cross-hatched area.
9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures.
Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities
section in this chapter for the correct fluid type. The use of any
other non-approved fluid may cause internal transmission damage.
10. Fluid can be checked at ambient
temperatures between 50–95°F
(10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid
until the transmission is at
normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at or below the bottom of
the dipstick.
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may cause overheating, shift and/or
engagement concerns and internal
transmission damage. If an overfill
condition occurs, excess fluid should
be removed by an authorized dealer.
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Ensure that the vehicle cannot
move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal
joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, only use a genuine Mazda air filter
element.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is
running.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air inlet tube to the engine air
filter cover and disconnect the tube from the cover (for V6 only).
2. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
3. Carefully separate the two
halves of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
5. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
6. Install a new air filter element.
Be careful not to crimp the
filter element edges between
the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage
and allow unfiltered air to enter
the engine if not properly
seated.
7. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps.
8. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
2.3L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
138
87 octane
1-3-4-2
182
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
245
87 octane
1-4-2-5-3-6
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch 0.051–0.057 inch 0.052–0.056 inch
(1.25–1.35mm) (1.29–1.45mm) (1.32–1.42mm)
Ignition system EDIS
EDIS
9.6:1
EDIS
9.7:1
Compression
ratio
9.7:1
Engine drivebelt routing
• 2.3L I4 Engine without A/C (with A/C similar)
• 3.0L V6 Engine without A/C
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• 3.0L V6 Engine with A/C
• 4.0L V6 Engine
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG
DATE: XX/XX
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL
XXXXKG
REAR GAWR:
XXXXKG
XXXXLB
WITH
TIRES
WITH
TIRES
RIMS
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
RIMS
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TYPE: XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EXT PNT:
XX
INT TR
RC: XX
AXLE
XX
DSO:
WB BRK
TP/PS
R
X
TR SPR
XXXXX
XXX
XXX
X
XX
X
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) /
Restraint System
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
DATE: XX/XX
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL
XXXXKG
REAR GAWR:
XXXXKG
XXXXLB
WITH
TIRES
WITH
TIRES
RIMS
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
XXXX/XXXXXXX
XXXX.XX
RIMS
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
AT XXX kPa/XX
PSI COLD
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TYPE: XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
EXT PNT:
XX
INT TR
RC: XX
AXLE
XX
DSO:
WB BRK
TP/PS
R
X
TR SPR
XXXXX
XXX
XXX
X
XX
X
XX
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX
Description
Code
Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E)
Five-speed manual (HD)
Five-speed manual (R1)
D
J
R
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
CELL PHONES
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s
hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be
distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is
unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area
before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this
warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands
free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other
electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using
cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased
concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump
environment.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Belt-Minder ...............................82
Booster seats ...............................96
ABS (see Brakes) .....................151
Air cleaner filter ...............258, 260
Brakes ........................................151
anti-lock ...........................151–152
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................86
and child safety seats ..............89
description ................................86
disposal ......................................91
driver airbag ........................86, 89
indicator light ...........................90
operation .............................86, 89
passenger airbag .................86, 89
warning light ...........................153
fluid, checking and adding ....254
fluid, specifications .................260
lubricant specifications ..........260
parking ....................................153
shift interlock ..........................156
Break-in period .............................5
Bulbs ............................................46
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................235
C
Cargo cage ...................................60
Cell phone warning ...................268
Changing a tire .........................179
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................151–152
Anti-theft system ........................66
Audio system
(see Radio) ......................19, 21, 26
Child safety restraints ................95
child seat belts .........................95
Automatic transmission ............156
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................157
fluid, specification ..................260
Child safety seats ........................99
attaching with tether straps ..102
in front seat ............................100
in rear seat ..............................100
tether anchorage hardware ...102
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....32
Auxiliary power point .................54
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................96
Axle
Chimes (warning) .......................17
lubricant specifications ..........260
traction lok ..............................155
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............208
instrument panel ....................211
interior .....................................211
Mazda car care products .......212
plastic parts ............................210
washing ....................................207
waxing .....................................207
wheels ......................................208
B
Battery .......................................233
acid, treating emergencies .....233
jumping a disabled battery ....189
maintenance-free ....................233
servicing ..................................233
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
wiper blades ............................210
Emergency Flashers .................168
Emission control system ..........249
Clock adjust
AM/FM Stereo ...........................20
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21
Premium AM/FM stereo
Engine ........................................264
cleaning ...................................208
coolant .....................................235
idle speed control ...................233
lubrication specifications .......260
service points ..................223–225
starting after a collision .........168
CD6/MP3 ...................................27
Clutch
fluid ..........................................254
operation while driving ..........159
recommended shift speeds ....160
Engine block heater .................150
Engine oil ..................................227
checking and adding ..............227
dipstick ....................................227
filter, specifications ................231
recommendations ...................231
specifications ..........................260
Console ........................................54
Coolant
checking and adding ..............235
refill capacities ........................240
specifications ..........................260
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................57
Event data recording ....................6
Exhaust fumes ..........................149
Customer
Assistance ..................196–197, 199
F
D
Foglamps .....................................42
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......161
driving off road .......................163
electronic shift ........................162
indicator light .........................162
preparing to drive your
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................43
Dipstick
engine oil .................................227
vehicle .....................................155
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................258
Fuel ............................................241
calculating fuel economy .......246
cap ...........................................243
choosing the right fuel ...........244
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................249
detergent in fuel .....................244
filling your vehicle
Driving under special
conditions ..................161, 164, 166
mud ..........................................165
sand .........................................165
snow and ice ...........................167
through water .................165, 167
with fuel ..................241, 243, 246
filter, specifications ................241
fuel pump shut-off switch .....168
improving fuel economy ........246
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................189
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
octane rating ...................245, 264
quality ......................................245
running out of fuel .................245
safety information relating to
cluster ........................................12
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................43
location of components ............12
automotive fuels .....................241
J
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......168
Fuses ..................................169–170
Jack ............................................179
positioning ...............................179
storage .............................179, 182
G
Jump-starting your vehicle ......189
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............243
K
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................246
Keys .......................................62, 67
positions of the ignition .........146
Gauges .........................................17
L
H
Lamps
bulb replacement
Hazard flashers .........................168
Headlamps ...................................42
aiming ........................................44
bulb specifications ....................46
daytime running lights .............43
flash to pass ..............................43
high beam .................................42
replacing bulbs .........................47
turning on and off ....................42
specifications chart ..................46
daytime running light ...............43
fog lamps ...................................42
headlamps .................................42
headlamps, flash to pass ..........43
instrument panel, dimming .....43
interior lamps .....................46–47
replacing bulbs .........................47
Lane change indicator
Heating
(see Turn signal) ........................46
heating and air conditioning
system .................................39–40
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........153
Hood ..........................................222
Load limits .................................129
Loading instructions .................135
I
Locks
Ignition ...............................146, 264
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..99
doors ..........................................62
Lubricant specifications ...........260
Lug nuts ....................................187
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................251
M
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................211
Manual transmission .................159
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
lubricant specifications ..........260
reverse .....................................160
illuminated entry ......................65
locking/unlocking doors ...........63
panic alarm ...............................63
replacing the batteries .............64
Mirrors .........................................56
fold away ...................................57
side view mirrors
S
(power) ...............................56–57
Motorcraft parts ........................241
Safety defects, reporting ..........206
Safety restraints ..............71, 75–79
Belt-Minder .............................82
extension assembly ..................80
for adults .............................76–79
for children .........................94–95
Occupant Classification
Sensor ........................................73
seat belt maintenance ..............80
warning light and chime ..........81
O
Octane rating ............................245
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................227
Overdrive ...............................59–60
Overheating ...............................188
P
Safety restraints - tether
anchors ......................................102
Parking brake ............................153
Safety seats for children ............99
Passenger Occupant
Classification Sensor ...................73
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................266
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................173
Satellite Radio Information ........35
Scheduled Maintenance ...........213
Seat Belt Maintenance ...............80
Power door locks ........................62
Power mirrors .......................56–57
Power point .................................54
Seat belts (see Safety
restraints) ........................71, 75–79
Power steering ..........................154
fluid, checking and adding ....252
fluid, specifications .................260
Seats ............................................69
child safety seats ......................99
Power Windows ...........................55
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................66
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................155
Servicing your vehicle ..............221
Setting the clock
R
AM/FM stereo ...........................20
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21
Premium AM/FM stereo
Radio ................................19, 21, 26
Relays ........................................169
Remote entry system .................63
CD6/MP3 ...................................27
Snowplowing .................................7
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Spark plugs, specifications .......264
Special notice
ambulance conversions ..............7
utility-type vehicles ....................7
recreational towing .................144
trailer towing ..........................135
wrecker ....................................195
Traction-lok rear axle ...............155
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................257
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................260
Transmission
Speed control ..............................57
automatic operation ...............156
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....156
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................256
lubricant specifications ..........260
manual operation ....................159
Starting your
vehicle ........................146–147, 149
jump starting ..........................189
Steering wheel
tilting .........................................54
Turn signal ..................................46
T
V
Tether anchors ..........................102
Tilt steering wheel ......................54
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................266
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
Roadside Emergencies ...........179
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....124
Vehicle loading ..........................129
camper bodies ........................145
Ventilating your vehicle ...........149
Tires ...........................108–109, 179
alignment ................................117
care ..........................................113
changing ..........................179, 184
checking the pressure ............113
inflating ...................................110
label .........................................123
replacing ..................................114
rotating ....................................117
safety practices .......................116
sidewall information ...............119
snow tires and chains ............129
spare tire .................................180
terminology .............................110
tire grades ...............................109
treadwear ........................109, 113
W
Warning chimes ...........................17
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................226
Water, Driving through .............167
Windows
power .........................................55
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................53
checking and adding fluid .....226
checking and cleaning ............226
replacing wiper blades ...........227
Towing .......................................135
Wrecker towing .........................195
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|